LG | DP272B | Owner's Manual | LG DP272B دليل المالك

LG DP272B دليل المالك
DP272B-P_AABSNLW_ENG
Portable DVD Player
Owner’s Manual
Model: DP272B
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this
product, please read this instruction booklet carefully
and completely.
Safety Precautions
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION:
This product employs a Laser System.
To ensure proper use of this product, please read this owner’s manual
carefully and retain it for future reference. Should the unit require maintenance, contact an authorized service center.
Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
To prevent direct exposure to laser beam, do not try to open the enclosure.
Visible laser radiation when open. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK)
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
This lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product’s enclosure that may be
of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
CAUTION: The apparatus should not be exposed to water (dripping or
splashing) and no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, should be
placed on the apparatus.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to
alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the
product.
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD, DO
NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
NOTES ON COPYRIGHTS:
It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast via cable, play in
public, or rent copyrighted material without permission.
WARNING : Do not install this equipment in a confined space such a
bookcase or similar unit.
This product features the copy protection function developed by
Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded on some discs. When
recording and playing the pictures of these discs on a VCR, picture noise
will appear.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected
by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision
Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
CAUTION: Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to
ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from over heating.
The openings should be never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,
sofa, rug or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a
built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is
provided or the manufacturer's instruction have been adhered to.
2
Safety Precautions (Continued)
CAUTION concerning the Power Cord
Most appliances recommend they be placed upon a dedicated
circuit;
That is, a single outlet circuit which powers only that appliance and
has no additional outlets or branch circuits. Check the specification
page of this owner's manual to be certain.
The cord grip for the plug fitted to this product is built
into the existing power cord as supplied. If, for any
reason you need to shorten the cord.
Do not overload wall outlets. Overloaded wall outlets, loose or damaged wall outlets, extension cords, frayed power cords, or damaged
or cracked wire insulation are dangerous. Any of these conditions
could result in electric shock or fire. Periodically examine the cord of
your appliance, and if its appearance indicates damage or deterioration, unplug it, discontinue use of the appliance, and have the cord
replaced with an exact replacement part by an authorized servicer.
A new plug must be used to ensure your continued
safety by securing the plug to the power cord in
accordance with Plug & Socket Regulations 1994.
DO NOT RE-USE THE PLUG.
Protect the power cord from physical or mechanical abuse, such as
being twisted, kinked, pinched, closed in a door, or walked upon.
Pay particular attention to plugs, wall outlets, and the point where the
cord exits the appliance.
To disconnect power from the mains, pull out the mains cord plug.
When installing the product, ensure that the plug is easily accessible.
3
Introduction
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
Contents
Playing an Audio CD or MP3/WMA file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Repeat Programmed Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Erasing a Track from Program List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Erasing the Complete Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Viewing a JPEG file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-31
Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Moving to another File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
To rotate picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
To listen to MP3/WMA music while watching picture. . . . . . . . . . . 31
JPEG disc compatibility with this unit is limited as follows . . . . . . 31
Playing a DVD VR format Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Playing a DivX Movie file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-34
DivX disc compatibility with this unit is limited as follows . . . . . . . 34
Playing an USB Flash Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Game . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-37
Introduction
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Before Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
About the
Symbol Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Symbol used in this Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Notes on Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Maintenance and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Types of Playable Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Regional Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Identification of Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-15
Connect the AC adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Connect the Automotive adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-15
Rotating the LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Playing a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connections
Setting up the Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-40
AV output Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
AV input Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Audio Connection to Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Advanced Operations
Displaying Disc Information on-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-23
General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
LANGUAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
AUDIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
LOCK (Parental Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-22
OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-26
Additional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Reference
Troubleshooting.
Language Code.
Area Codes . . . .
Specifications . .
4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
41
42
43
44
Before Use
Notes on Discs
Handling Discs
Do not touch the playback side of the disc. Hold the disc by the
edges so that fingerprints do not get on the surface. Never stick
paper or tape on the disc.
This manual provides information on the operation and maintenance of your unit. Should the unit require service, contact an
authorized service location.
About the
Symbol Display
“
” may appear on your LCD display during operation and
indicates that the function explained in this owner’s manual is not
available on that specific DVD video disc.
Storing Discs
After playing, store the disc in its case. Do not expose the disc to
direct sunlight or sources of heat and never leave it in a parked
car exposed to direct sunlight.
Symbol Used in this Manual
NOTE
Cleaning Discs
Fingerprints and dust on the disc can cause poor picture quality
and sound distortion. Before playing, clean the disc with a clean
cloth. Wipe the disc from the center out.
Indicates special notes and operating features.
TIP
Indicates tips and hints for making the task easier.
A section whose title has one of the following symbols is
applicable only to the disc represented by the symbol.
ALL
ACD
All discs and files listed below
DVD and finalized DVD±R/RW
Video CDs.
MP3 MP3 files.
Audio CDs.
WMA
WMA files.
DVD
VCD
DivX
Do not use strong solvents such as alcohol, benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners, or anti-static spray intended for older
vinyl records.
DivX files.
5
Introduction
To ensure proper use of this product, please read this owner’s
manual carefully and retain for future reference.
Before Use (Continued)
Maintenance and Service
Maintaining the Unit
Refer to the information in this chapter before contacting a service
technician.
The DVD player is a high-tech, precision device. If the optical
pick-up lens and disc drive parts are dirty or worn, the picture
quality could be diminished.
Handling the Unit
Depending on the operating environment, regular inspection and
maintenance are recommended after every 1,000 hours of use.
When shipping the unit
For details, please contact your nearest authorized service center.
Please save the original shipping carton and packing materials. If
you need to ship the unit, for maximum protection, re-pack the unit
as it was originally packed at the factory.
Keeping the exterior surfaces clean
• Do not use volatile liquids such as insecticide spray near the
unit.
•
Do not leave rubber or plastic products in contact with the unit
for a long period of time. since they leave marks on the
surface.
Cleaning the unit
To clean the player, use a soft, dry cloth. If the surfaces are
extremely dirty, use a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution.
Do not use strong solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner, as
these might damage the surface of the unit.
6
Before Use (Continued)
DVD
(8 cm / 12 cm disc)
Video CD(VCD)
(8 cm / 12 cm disc)
Regional Code
This unit has a regional code printed on the rear of the unit. This
unit can play only DVD discs labelled same as the rear of the unit
or “ALL”.
Audio CD
(8 cm / 12 cm disc)
In addition, this unit plays DVD±R/RW and CD-R/RW, SVCD, USB
that contains audio titles, DivX, MP3, WMA, and/or JPEG files.
Notes on Regional Codes
This indicates a product feature that is capable of
playing DVD-RW discs recorded with Video Recording
format.
• Most DVD discs have a globe with one or more numbers in it
clearly visible on the cover. This number must match your unit’s
regional code or the disc cannot play.
• If you try to play a DVD with a different regional code from your
player, the message “Check Regional Code” appears on the TV
screen.
NOTES
• Depending on the conditions of the recording equipment or the
CD-R/RW (or DVD±R/RW) disc itself, some CD-R/RW
(or DVD±R/RW) discs cannot be played on the unit.
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• Do not attach any seal or label to either side (the labeled side or
the recorded side) of a disc.
• Do not use irregularly shaped CDs (e.g., heart-shaped
or octagonal). It may result in malfunctions.
DTS and DTS Digital Out are trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.
7
Introduction
Customers should note that permission is required in order to
download MP3 / WMA files and music from the Internet. Our
company has no right to grant such permission. Permission
should always be sought from the copyright owner.
Types of Playable Discs
Identification of Controls
a LCD screen
Main Unit
b Speaker
c LCD MODE: NORMAL → 4:3 Mode → OFF
d Function Buttons
•
•
•
•
•
DISPLAY: Accesses On-Screen display.
MODE: Selects a mode among DISC, AV IN or USB.
SETUP: Accesses or removes setup menu.
MENU: Accesses menu on a DVD disc.
COLOR/BRIGHT: Selects the mode of LCD adjustment
Brightness → Color → OFF
• FLIP: Rotates the screen.
a
b
e Menu Control Buttons
• b B v V (left/right/up/down)
Selects an item in the menu.
• b B: Adjusts the COLOR/BRIGHT.
• ENTER: Confirms menu selection.
c
f Disc Lid
g OPEN button: Push this button to open the Disc lid.
d
e
f
g
8
Identification of Controls (continued)
a Volume Control
b Earphones jacks
c COAXIAL jack
d AV IN/OUT jack
NOTE
a
b
c
d
If the VIDEO IN signal is not connected in AV IN mode, this unit
will automatically power off in 10 minutes to prevent battery discharge.
e
e DC IN
Connect the AC adapter or Automotive adapter.
f Remote sensor
Receive the signal from the Remote Control for operation.
g Battery charge indicator
h
(POWER): Switches the player ON or OFF.
i Playback buttons
f
g
h
i
• x ( STOP ): Stops playback.
• B/X ( PLAY/PAUSE ):
Starts playback/ Pauses playback temporarily.
• . (Reverse SKIP/SEARCH )
Search backward*/ go to beginning of current chapter or
track or go to previous chapter or track.
• > (Forward SKIP/SEARCH)
Search forward*/ go to next chapter or track.
* Press and hold button for about two seconds.
j
j USB: Connect an USB Flash Drive.
9
Introduction
Main Unit
Identification of Controls (continued)
Remote Control
a
b
c
a
POWER: Switches DVD Player ON or OFF.
AUDIO: Selects an audio language.
SUBTITLE: Selects a subtitle language.
ANGLE: Selects a DVD camera angle, if
available.
Reverse SKIP/SEARCH ( . ):
Search backward*/ go to beginning of current
chapter or track or go to previous chapter or
track.
Forward SKIP/SEARCH ( > ):
Search forward*/ go to next chapter or track.
* Press and hold button for about two
seconds.
SLOW ( t / T ): Reverse/ Forward slow
playback.
d
b
SETUP: Accesses or removes setup menu.
MENU: Accesses menu on a DVD disc.
RETURN (O): Removes the menu.
DISPLAY: Accesses On-Screen display.
b B v V (left/right/up/down):
Selects an item in the menu.
ENTER: Confirms menu selection.
10
c
PAUSE/STEP ( X ): Pauses playback
temporarily/ press repeatedly for
frame-by-frame playback.
PLAY (N): Starts playback.
STOP ( x ): Stops playback.
0-9 number buttons:
Selects numbered items in a menu.
PROG.: Places a track on the program list.
CLEAR: Removes a track number on the
program list or a mark on the MARKER
SEARCH menu.
d
TITLE: Displays title menu, if available.
REPEAT: Repeat chapter, track, title all.
A-B: Repeat sequence.
ZOOM: Enlarges video image.
MARKER: Marks any point during playback.
SEARCH: Displays MARKER SEARCH menu.
RANDOM: Plays tracks in random order.
Identification of Controls (Continued)
Insert the battery (Lithium battery)
NOTES
• Replace Remote Control unit battery with 3V micro lithium cells
such as CR. 2025 or its equivalent.
• Dispose of battery safety in accordance with local laws. Do not
dispose of in fire.
Warning : The battery used in this device may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble, incinerate, or heat above 100 °C (212 °F).
Replace the battery with Matsushita Elec. Ind. Co., Ltd.
(Panasonic), part no. CR. 2025 only.
Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. Dispose of used batteries. Keep batteries away
from children. Do not disassemble or dispose of in fire.
NOTES
• Do not expose the Remote Control sensor to bright light.
• Do not place obstacles between the Remote Control sensor and
the Remote Control.
V Replacing the button-type battery
The battery normally lasts for about a year. Replace the battery if
the Remote Control fails to operate the unit when used within the
operation range.
11
Introduction
Button-type battery (Lithium battery)
1. Pinch the battery holder clip together then pull the tab to
remove the battery holder.
2. Insert the battery with the + facing in the same direction as the
+ on the battery holder.
3. Replace the battery holder with battery into the Remote Control
unit making sure that it is fully inserted.
Power Connections
Caution
Connect the AC adapter.
• Do not connect the power plug to a power outlet other than that
indicated on the label, as this can result in a risk of fire or
electric shock.
• Do not connect or disconnect the power plug with wet hands.
Doing so may cause electric shock.
• Do not use an AC adapter other than one specified, as it can
cause a fire or damage to the player.
AC adapter
• This AC adapter operates on 100-240V~ 50/60Hz 1.5A.
• Contact an electrical parts distributor for assistance in selecting
a suitable AC plug adapter or AC cord set.
• Manufactured by WANLIDA Digital Technology Co., Ltd.
a
b
a Connect the AC Adapter to the DC IN
jack on the unit.
b Connect the AC adapter to the wall outlet.
12
Power Connections (continued)
This unit and its automotive adapter are designed for use in vehicles that have 8.5-16 volt, negative ground electrical systems.
(This is standard for most vehicles.) If your vehicle has a different
type of electrical system, the DC power system cannot be used.
a
Cigarette lighter socket
b
Examples include:
- Inside a car with the windows closed and in direct sunshine.
- Near a heating appliance.
a Connect the automotive adapter to the DC IN
the unit.
Automotive adapter
• This automotive adapter operates on DC 8.5-16V.
• Contact an electrical parts distributor for assistance in selecting
a suitable automotive adapter.
• Manufactured by WANLIDA Digital Technology Co., Ltd.
jack on
b Connect the automotive adapter to the car’s cigarette lighter
socket.
13
Introduction
Caution
• To prevent electrical shock and possible damage to your unit or
vehicle, always unplug the automotive adapter from the cigarette
lighter socket before you remove the plug from your unit.
• A 3 amp. 250V fuse for protection is installed in the automotive
adapter.
• While the engine is being started, disconnect the automotive
adapter from the car’s cigarette lighter socket.
• Do not operate your unit when the car battery is discharged.
Peak current from the car generator may cause the DC fuse to
blow.
• If the vehicle’s supply voltage drops below approximately 10
volts, your unit may not work properly.
• Do not leave your unit in a place where the temperature
exceeds 70°C (158°F), or the pick-up device may be damaged.
Connect the Automotive adapter
Power Connections (continued)
Battery Pack
NOTES
Charge the battery pack before using it for the first time.
• Do not detach the battery pack during playback.
• Be careful not to drop the battery pack.
A Detaching the battery pack
a Press the PUSH knob.
Attaching the battery pack
a Match the hooks of the battery pack into the holes on the
bottom of the player.
A
b Pull the battery pack until the hooks click.
b Press and slide the battery pack until the hooks click.
b
b
a
a Hooks
ATTENTION
The product that you have purchased contains a rechargeable battery. The battery is recyclable. At
the end of it’s useful life, under various state and local laws, it may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your local solid waste/officials for details in your
area for recycling options or proper disposal.
14
Power Connections (Continued)
Player
A
Recharging and play times
Recharging
without Playback
Approx.
3 hour
Battery Pack
Play time
LCD On
LCD Off
Approx.
Approx.
3.5 hours*
4 hours
* When Brightness control is set to initial mode.
- using the headphones and volume center.
Connect the AC
adapter cord
Charge indicator
A
Press “Display” to display the battery status on the screen.
3. During recharging, charge indicator is red. If recharging is
complete, charge indicator changes to green color.
Full
CAUTION
Take the following precautions to avoid liquid leakage,
overheating, etc.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Low
Recharge
If using the AC adapter, battery display does not appear.
Do not use any unauthorized parts.
Use the authorized AC adapter when recharging battery.
Do not expose to high temperature above 60°C (140°F).
Do not attempt to dismantle or modify the unit.
Excessive impact may cause the unit to malfunction.
Do not incinerate.
Do not disassemble; dispose of properly.
Do not short-circuit.
If the battery capacity is not enough, “Check Battery Status”
or “
” is displayed on the screen and then the power is
automatically turned off after a few minute.
A
If play time dramatically reduces after recharging
The battery pack has reached the end of its service life (it can be
recharged about 300 times).
NOTE
A
Charging a battery only happens when the power is off.
The battery will not be charged when it is naturally or purposely
discharged. Because the unit cannot perceive battery voltage,
even if you attached the battery.
When you are in this situation, power on the unit and then power
off again. Then battery charge will proceed.
• Detach the battery pack. (Even if the unit is off, it still uses some power.
This can lead to over discharging of the battery and malfunction.)
• Recharge the battery pack when you are ready to use it again.
15
If the unit is not used for a long time
Introduction
A Charging the battery pack
1. Attach the battery pack to the player.
2. Connect the AC power adapter to the player and
the plug into an AC outlet.
Rotating the LCD
After rotating LCD completely, you can fold the LCD screen as
shown above.
You can rotate LCD clockwise an angle of 180 degrees. However,
if you turn it by force, it can cause serious damage.
16
Playing a Disc
Select a MODE
2. Open the outer cover and press POWER button.
Selects a mode among DISC, AV IN or USB.
3. Press OPEN to open the disc lid and insert a disc with the side
you want to play label up. Close the disc lid by hand.
1. Press MODE button on the unit.
The mode selection menu appears on the screen.
• If the disc is placed in upside down (and it is a single-sided disc),
“CHECK DISC” or “DISC ERROR” appears on the screen.
• After playing back all of the chapters in the title, the unit automatically
stops and returns to the menu screen.
4. Press PLAY(N) to playback.
5. Adjust the volume.
2. Use b / B to select the mode then press ENTER.
NOTES
• DISC: The disc menu or playback picture for the disc appears
• Place a disc with the playback side down on the spindle, and
push gently on the center of the disc so it goes into position.
• If you are not using the LCD on this unit, select OFF to conserve
power.
• The LCD is turned off if you close the unit.
• The picture shown on the LCD depends on the display mode
and the size recorded on the disc.
A
on the screen .
• AV IN: A picture from external device appears on the screen.
• USB: A file or folder list in USB Flash Drive appears on the
screen.
Changing the size of the picture
Use the LCD MODE button to change the picture mode.
The mode is shown on the unit’s display as follows.
NORMAL → 4:3 mode → OFF
NOTE
May appear to differ according to kind of disc.
17
Introduction
1. Prepare the power supply.
On-Screen Display
Displaying Disc Information on-screen
Initial Settings
You can display various information about the disc loaded
on-screen.
By using the Setup menu, you can make various adjustments to
items such as picture and sound. You can also set a language for
the subtitles and the Setup menu, among other things. For details
on each Setup menu item, see pages 19 to 23.
1. Press DISPLAY to show various
playback information. The items
displayed differ depending on the
disc type or playing status.
To display and exit the Menu:
Press SETUP to display the menu. A second press of SETUP will
take you back to initial screen.
To go to the next level:
Press B on the Remote Control.
2. You can select an item by pressing v / V and change or select
the setting by pressing b / B.
Title (Track) – Current title (or track). number/total number of
titles (or tracks).
Chapter – Current chapter number/total number of chapters.
Time – Elapsed playing time.
Audio – Selected audio language or channel.
Subtitle – Selected subtitle.
Angle – Selected angle/total number of angles.
To go back to the previous level:
Press b on the Remote Control.
General Operation
1. Press SETUP. The Setup menu appears.
2. Use v / V to select the desired option then press B to move to
the second level. The screen shows the current setting for the
selected item, as well as alternate setting(s).
3. Use v / V to select the second desired option then press B to
move to the third level.
NOTE
If no button is pressed for a few seconds, the on-screen display
disappears.
4. Use v / V to select the desired setting then press ENTER to
confirm your selection. Some items require additional steps.
5. Press SETUP or PLAY(N) to exit the Setup menu.
18
Initial Settings
DISPLAY
Menu Language
TV Aspect
Select a language for the Setup menu and on-screen display.
4:3: Select when a standard 4:3 TV is connected.
Disc Audio / Subtitle / Menu
16:9: Select when a 16:9 TV is connected.
Select the language you prefer for the audio track (disc audio),
subtitles and the disc menu.
NOTE
If the TV Aspect option is set to 16:9, the Display Mode setting is
automatically set to Widescreen.
Original: Refers to the original language in which the disc was
recorded.
Display Mode
Other: To select another language, press numeric buttons and
then ENTER to enter the corresponding 4-digit number according to the language code list on the page 42. If you enter the
wrong language code, press CLEAR.
Display Mode setting works only when the TV Aspect mode is set
to “4:3”.
LetterBox: Displays a wide picture with bands on the upper
and lower portions of the screen.
Off (for Disc Subtitle) – Turn off Subtitle.
Panscan: Automatically displays the wide picture on the entire
screen and cuts off the portions that do not fit.
19
Advanced Operations
LANGUAGE
Initial Settings (continued)
AUDIO
Sample Freq. (Frequency)
Each DVD disc has a variety of audio output options. Set the player’s AUDIO options according to the type of audio system you use.
If your receiver or amplifier is NOT capable of handling 96 kHz
signals, select 48 kHz. When this choice is made, this unit automatically converts any 96 kHz signals to 48 kHz so your system
can decode them.
If your receiver or amplifier is capable of handling 96 kHz signals,
select 96 kHz. When this choice is made, this unit passes each
type of signal through without any further processing.
Check the documentation for your amplifier to verify its
capabilities.
DRC (Dynamic Range Control)
With the DVD format, you can hear a program’s soundtrack in the
most accurate and realistic presentation possible, thanks to digital
audio technology. However, you may wish to compress the
dynamic range of the audio output (the difference between the
loudest sounds and the quietest ones). This allows you to listen to
a movie at a lower volume without losing clarity of sound. Set
DRC to On for this effect.
Dolby Digital / DTS / MPEG
Bitstream: Select “Bitstream” if you connect the unit’s DIGITAL
OUT jack to an amplifier or other equipment with a Dolby
Digital, DTS or MPEG decoder.
PCM (for Dolby Digital / MPEG): Select when connected to a
two-channel digital stereo amplifier. DVDs encoded in Dolby
Digital or MPEG will be automatically downmixed to two-channel PCM audio.
Vocal
Set to On only when a multi-channel karaoke DVD is playing.
The karaoke channels on the disc mix into normal stereo sound.
Off (for DTS): If you select “Off”, the DTS signal is not output
through the DIGITAL OUT jack.
20
Initial Settings (continued)
LOCK (Parental Control)
3. Select a rating from 1 to 8 using the v / V buttons.
Unlock: If you select unlock, parental control is not active and
the disc plays in full.
NOTE
If you set a rating for the unit, all disc scenes with the same
rating or lower are played. Higher rated scenes are not played
unless an alternate scene is available on the disc. The alternative must have the same rating or a lower one. If no suitable
alternative is found, playback stops. You must enter the 4-digit
password or change the rating level in order to play the disc.
Rating
Blocks playback of rated DVDs based on their content. Not all
discs are rated.
4. Press ENTER to confirm your rating selection, then press
SETUP to exit the menu.
1. Select “Rating” on the LOCK menu then press B.
2. To access the Rating, Password and Area Code features, you
must input the 4-digit password you created. If you have not yet
entered a password you are prompted to do so.
Input a 4-digit code and press ENTER. Enter it again and press
ENTER to verify. If you make a mistake before pressing
ENTER, press CLEAR.
21
Advanced Operations
Rating 1-8: Rating one (1) has the most restrictions and rating
eight (8) is the least restrictive.
Initial Settings (continued)
Password
Area Code
You can enter or change password.
Enter the code of the area whose standards were used to rate the
DVD video disc, based on the list on page 43.
1. Select Password on the LOCK menu then press B.
2. To make a new password:
Press ENTER when the “New” option is highlighted. Enter a
new password using the numbered buttons then press ENTER.
Enter the password again to verify.
1. Select “Area Code” on the LOCK menu then press B.
2. Follow step 2 as shown previous page (Rating).
3. Select the first character using v / V buttons.
To change the password:
Press ENTER when the “Change” option is highlighted. Enter a
current password using the numbered buttons then press
ENTER. Enter a new password using the numbered buttons
then press ENTER. Enter the password again to verify.
4. Press ENTER and select the second character using v / V
buttons.
5. Press ENTER to confirm your area code selection.
3. Press SETUP to exit the menu.
If you forget your password
If you forget your password, you can clear it using the following
steps:
1. Press SETUP to display the Setup menu.
2. Input the 6-digit number “210499” and the password is cleared.
22
Initial Settings(Continued)
DivX(R) VOD
We provide you the DivX® VOD (Video On Demand) registration
code that allows you to rent and purchase videos using the DivX®
VOD service. For more information, visit www.divx.com/vod.
The PBC, Game, DivX(R) VOD settings can be changed.
1. Select “DivX(R) VOD” option then press B.
2. Press ENTER while “Select” is selected and the registration
code will appear.
Use the registration code to purchase or rent the videos from
DivX® VOD service at www.divx.com/vod. Follow the instructions
and download the video onto a disc for playback on this unit.
3. Press ENTER to exit.
NOTE
All the downloaded videos from DivX® VOD can only be played
back on this unit.
PBC
Set Playback Control (PBC) to On or Off.
Game
On: Video CDs with PBC are played according to the PBC.
You can play games with this unit using remote control.
(See “Game” on page 36-37)
Off: Video CDs with PBC are played in the same way as Audio
CDs.
Select: The game menu appears on the TV screen.
23
Advanced Operations
OTHERS
General Features
If a menu screen is displayed
Moving to another TITLE
When a disc has more than one title, you can move to another title.
Press DISPLAY during playback or resume play then the appropriate
number (0-9) or use b / B to move to another title.
DVD
Use the b B v V buttons to select the title/chapter you want to view,
then press ENTER to start. Press TITLE or MENU to return to the
menu screen.
Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK
VCD
ALL
During playback, press SKIP/SEARCH (. or >) to go to the
next chapter/track or to return to the beginning of the current
chapter/track.
Use the number buttons to select the track you want to view and
press RETURN to return to the menu screen. Menu settings and
operating procedures may differ. Follow the instructions on the each
menu screen. You also may set PBC to Off (See “PBC” on page 23).
Press SKIP . twice briefly to step back to the previous
chapter/track.
NOTES
Search
• If parental control is set and the disc is not within the rating settings
you must input the password.
(See “LOCK Menu” on page 21-22.)
ALL
1. Press and hold SKIP/SEARCH (. or >) for about two
seconds during playback.
The player will now go into SEARCH mode.
• DVDs may have a region code. Your unit does not play discs that
have a region code different from your unit.
2. Press and hold SKIP/SEARCH (. or >) repeatedly to select
the required speed.
DVD, DivX disc: 4 steps
Video CD, MP3, WMA, Audio CD: 3 steps
Unless stated otherwise, all operations described use the
Remote Control. Some features may also be available on the
Setup menu.
Resume Play
DVD
3. To exit SEARCH mode, press PLAY(N).
Slow Motion
ALL
When play is stopped, the unit records the point where STOP was
pressed (RESUME function).
Press PLAY(N) and play will resume from this point.
DVD
VCD
DivX
1. Press SLOW (t or T) during playback.
The player will enter Slow mode.
DVD disc: 4 steps
Video CD, DivX: 4 steps (forward only)
2. To exit slow motion mode, press PLAY(N).
24
General Features (Continued)
Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback
ALL
During playback, press REPEAT repeatedly to select a desired
repeat mode.
ALL
During playback, press PAUSE/STEP(X) to pause playback.
DVD Video Discs: Chapter/Title/Off
DVD
VCD
DivX
Video CDs, Audio CD, DivX/MP3/WMA discs: Track/All/Off
Press PAUSE/STEP(X) repeatedly to play Frame-by-Frame.
( Remote Control Only )
To exit still motion mode, press PLAY(N).
Time Search
DVD
VCD
NOTES
• On a Video CD with PBC, you must set PBC to Off on the setup menu
to use the repeat function (See “PBC” on page 23).
• If you press SKIP (>) once during Repeat Chapter (Track) playback,
the repeat playback cancels.
DivX
To start playing at any chosen time on the disc:
1. Press DISPLAY during playback. The time search box shows
the elapsed playing time.
Zoom
DVD
VCD
DivX
2. Use v / V to select the time search box and “-:--:--” appears.
3. Input the required start time in hours, minutes, and seconds
from left to right. If you enter the wrong numbers, press
CLEAR to remove the numbers you entered. Then input the
correct numbers.
During watching pictures, press ZOOM to enlarge the video image
(3 steps).
You can move through the zoomed picture using b B v V buttons.
Press CLEAR to exit.
4. Press ENTER to confirm. Playback starts from the selected
time.
Zoom may not work on some DVDs.
Repeat A-B
DVD
VCD
DivX
NOTES
ACD
During playback, each press of A-B button to select point A and
point B and repeats a sequence from point A (Starting point) to
point B (End point).
Press A-B again to cancel.
25
Advanced Operations
Repeat
General Features (Continued)
Title Menu
Subtitles
DVD
DVD
DivX
If the current DVD title has a menu, the title menu appears on the
screen. Otherwise, the disc menu may appears.
Press SUBTITLE repeatedly during playback to see the different
subtitle languages.
Disc Menu
NOTE
DVD
If there is no information or there is a code that can not read in the
DivX file, “ 1 ” etc are displayed.
Press MENU and the disc menu is displayed. Press MENU again
to exit.
Changing the Audio Language
DVD
DivX
Press AUDIO repeatedly during playback to hear a different audio
language or encoding method.
With DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode that have both a main
and a Bilingual audio channel, you can switch between Main (L),
Bilingual (R), or a mix of both (Main + Bilingual) by pressing
AUDIO.
VCD
Press AUDIO repeatedly during playback to hear a different audio
channel (STEREO, LEFT, or RIGHT).
Camera Angle
DVD
During playback of DVD disc contains scenes recorded different
camera angles, press ANGLE repeatedly to select a desired angle.
TIP
The angle indicator will blink on the screen during scenes recorded at
different angles as an indication that angle switching is possible.
26
Additional features
DVD
VCD
Last Scene Memory
DivX
To enter a Marker
DVD
ACD
VCD1.1
This unit memorizes last scene from the last disc that is viewed.
The last scene remains in memory even if you remove the disc
from the unit or switch off the unit. If you load a disc that has the
scene memorized, the scene is automatically recalled.
You can start playback from up to nine memorized points. To enter
a marker, press MARKER at the desired point on the disc. The
Marker icon appears on the TV screen briefly. Repeat to enter up
to nine markers.
NOTES
This unit does not memorize the scene of a disc if you switch off
the unit before commencing to play the disc.
To Recall or Clear a Marked Scene
1. During disc playback, press SEARCH. The marker search
menu appears on the screen.
Screen Saver/Auto Power Off
2. Within 9 seconds, press b / B to select a marker number that
you want to recall or clear.
The screen saver appears when you leave the unit in Stop mode
for about five minutes. If the Screen Saver is displayed for five
minutes, the unit automatically turns itself off.
3. Press ENTER and playback starts from the marked scene. Or,
Press CLEAR and the marker number is erased from the list.
4. You can play any marker by inputting its number on the marker
search menu.
NOTES
• Some subtitles recorded around the marker may fail to appear
(DVD).
• All the markers are cleared when the power is turned off or the
disc is removed.
• The marker is not stored when the DVD or title menu is displayed on the screen.
27
Advanced Operations
Marker Search
Playing an Audio CD or MP3/WMA file
MP3 / WMA file compatibility with this unit is limited as
follows:
• Sampling frequency: within 8 - 48 kHz (MP3),
within 32 - 48kHz (WMA)
This unit can play Audio CDs or MP3/WMA files.
MP3/ WMA/ Audio CD
Once you insert an MP3/WMA files recorded media or Audio CD, a
menu appears on the TV screen.
Press v / V to select a track/file then press PLAY(N) or ENTER
and playback starts. You can use variable playback functions.
Refer to page 24-25.
• Bit rate: within 8 - 320kbps (MP3),
32 - 192kbps (WMA)
• The unit cannot read an MP3/WMA file that has a file extension
other than “.mp3” / “.wma”.
• CD-R physical format should be ISO 9660
• If you record MP3 / WMA files using software that cannot create
a file system (eg. Direct-CD) it is impossible to playback MP3 /
WMA files. We recommend that you use Easy-CD Creator, which
creates an ISO 9660 file system.
• File names should have a maximum of 16 letters and must incorporate an .mp3 or .wma extension.
ID3 TAG
• When playing a file containing information such as track titles,
you can see the information by pressing DISPLAY.
[ Title, Artist, Album, Year, Comment ]
• They should not contain special letters such as / ? * : “ < > l etc.
• The total number of files on the disc should be less than 650.
• This unit requires discs and recordings to meet certain technical
standards in order to achieve optimal playback quality.
Pre-recorded DVDs are automatically set to these standards.
There are many different types of recordable disc formats
(including CD-R containing MP3 or WMA files) and these require
certain pre-existing conditions (see above) to ensure compatible
playback.
• If there is no information, “NO ID3 TAG” appears on the display.
TIPS
• If you are in a file list on the MUSIC menu and want to return to
the Folder list, use the v / V to highlight
and press ENTER.
• Press MENU to move to the next page.
• On a CD with MP3/WMA, JPEG,and MOVIE file, you can switch
MUSIC, PHOTO and MOVIE menu. Press TITLE and MUSIC,
PHOTO and MOVIE word on top of the menu is highlighted.
28
Programmed Playback
Repeat Programmed Tracks
Press REPEAT to select a desired repeat mode.
• Track: repeats the current track
• All: repeats all the tracks on programmed list.
• Off(No display): does not play repeatedly.
1. Insert an Audio CD or MP3/WMA files recorded media. AUDIO
CD or MUSIC menu appears.
2. Press PROG. The E mark will appear
NOTE
NOTE
Press PROG. again, then the
Program Edit mode.
E
If you press > once during Repeat Track playback, the repeat
playback cancels.
mark will disappear to exit the
Erasing a Track from Program List
1. Press PROG. and the
E
mark will appear
2. Use v V b B to select the track that you wish to erase from
the Program list.
Audio CD Menu
3. Press CLEAR. Repeat step 1-3 to erase additional tracks on
the list.
MP3/WMA Menu
Erasing the Complete Program List
3. Select a track on the “List”, then press ENTER to place the
selected track on the “Program” list. Repeat to place additional
tracks on the list.
1. Press PROG. and the
E
mark will appear
2. Use v V b B to select “Clear All”, then press ENTER.
4. Press B.
Select the track you want to start playing on the “Program” list.
NOTE
The programs are also cleared when the power is off or the disc is
removed.
5. Press PLAY(N) or ENTER to start. Playback begins in the
order in which you programmed the tracks. Playback stops
after all of the tracks on the “Program” list have played once.
6. To resume normal playback from programmed playback, select
a track of AUDIO CD (or MUSIC) list and then press PLAY(N).
29
Advanced Operations
The program function enables you to store your favorite tracks
from any disc in the player memory.
A program can contain 30 tracks.
Viewing a JPEG file
This unit can play JPEG files.
TIPS
1. Insert a JPEG files recorded media. The PHOTO menu
appears on the TV screen.
• Press MENU to move to the next page.
• There are three Slide Speed options
:
>>> (Fast), >> (Normal) and > (Slow).
Use v V b B to highlight the
. Then, use b / B to select the
option you want to use.
• On a CD with MP3/WMA, JPEG and MOVIE file, you can switch
MUSIC, PHOTO and MOVIE menu. Press TITLE and MUSIC,
PHOTO and MOVIE word on top of the menu is highlighted.
• While watching a picture, press RETURN (O) to hide the help
menu.
2. Press v / V to select a folder, and press ENTER. A list of files
in the folder appears. If you are in a file list and want to return
to the previous Folder list, use the v / V buttons on the remote
to highlight
and press ENTER.
Slide Show
Use v V b B to highlight the
ENTER.
3. If you want to view a particular file, press v / V to highlight a
file and press ENTER or PLAY(N).
(Slide Show) then press
Still Picture
4. While viewing a file, you can press STOP(x) to move to the
previous menu (PHOTO menu).
1. Press PAUSE/STEP(X) during slide show.
The unit will now go into pause mode.
2. To return to the slide show, press PLAY(N) or press
PAUSE/STEP(X) again.
30
Viewing a JPEG file (Continued)
Moving to another file
Press SKIP/SEARCH (. or >) or cursor (b or B) once while
viewing a picture to advance to the next or previous file.
• Depending upon the size and number of JPEG files, it could take a
long time for the unit to read the disc’s contents. If you don’t see an
on-screen display after several minutes, some of the files may be too
large — reduce the resolution of the JPEG files to less than 2M pixels
as 2760 x 2048 pixels and burn another disc.
Zoom
During watching pictures, press ZOOM to enlarge the video image
(3 steps).
You can move through the zoomed picture using b B v V buttons.
Press CLEAR to exit.
• The total number of files and folders on the disc should be less than
650.
To rotate picture
• Some discs may be incompatible due to a different recording format or
the condition of disc.
Press v / V during showing a picture to rotate the picture clockwise or counter clockwise.
• Ensure that all the selected files have the “.jpg” extensions when
copying into the CD layout.
To listen to MP3/WMA music while watching picture
• If the files have “.jpe” or “.jpeg” extensions, please rename them as
“.jpg” file.
1. Insert the disc containing the two types of file in the unit.
• File names without “.jpg” extension will not be able to be read by this
unit. Even though the files are shown as JPEG image files in Windows
Explorer.
2. Press TITLE to display PHOTO menu.
3. Press v / V to select a photo file.
4. Use B to select
Playback starts.
icon then press ENTER.
5. While viewing a file, you can press STOP(x) to move to the
previous menu (PHOTO menu).
TIP
To listen to only the desired music while watching picture, programmed the desired files from the “MUSIC” menu and then proceed as above.
31
Advanced Operations
JPEG disc compatibility with this unit is limited as
follows:
Playing a DVD VR format Disc
This unit will play DVD-RW discs recorded using the Video
Recording (VR) format.
1. Insert a disc and close the tray. The DVD-VR menu appears
on the screen.
2. Press v / V to select a track then press PLAY(N) or ENTER
and playback starts.
3. Press MENU to move to the list menu.
NOTES
• This unit will play DVD-R/RW disc that is recorded using the DVD-Video
format that have been finalized using a DVD-recorder. Unfinalized DVDR/RW discs cannot be played in this unit.
• Some DVD-VR disc are made with CPRM data by DVD RECORDER.
Player does not support these kinds of discs.
What is ‘CPRM’?
CPRM is a copy protection system (with scramble system) only allowing
the recording of ‘copy once’ broadcast programs. CPRM stands for
Content Protection for Recordable Media.
32
Playing a DivX Movie file
1. Insert a DivX file recorded media. The MOVIE menu appears
on the screen.
TIPS
• Press MENU to move to the next page.
• On a CD with MP3/WMA, JPEG and MOVIE file, you can switch
MUSIC, PHOTO and MOVIE menu. Press TITLE and MUSIC,
PHOTO and MOVIE word on top of the menu is highlighted.
• The disc subtitle may not be displayed properly, if a DivX subtitle
is downloaded through the internet.
2. Press v / V to select a folder, and press ENTER. A list of files
in the folder appears. If you are in a file list and want to return
to the Folder list, use the v / V buttons on the remote to highlight
and press ENTER.
• If the disc subtitle setup menu does not have the DivX subtitle
language you are going to play, the subtitle language may not
be displayed properly.
3. If you want to view a particular file, press v / V to highlight a
file and press ENTER or PLAY(N). You can use variable playback functions. Refer to page 24-27.
• The DivX subtitle file name has to be identified with the DivX file
name to display by this unit.
4. Press STOP(x) to stop the playback. The Movie menu
appears.
33
Advanced Operations
Notice for displaying the DivX subtitle
If the subtitle does not display properly during playback, press and
hold SUBTITLE about 3 seconds then press b / B to select another language code until the subtitle is displayed properly.
This unit can play DivX files.
Playing a DivX Movie file (Continued)
DivX disc compatibility with this unit is limited as follows:
Playable DivX file
• Available resolution size of the DivX file is under 720x576 (W x H)
pixel.
".avi ", ".mpg ", ".mpeg "
Playable Subtitle format
• The file name of the DivX subtitle is limited to 56 characters.
SubRip(*.srt/*.txt)
SAMI(*.smi)
SubStation Alpha(*.ssa/*.txt)
MicroDVD(*.sub/*.txt)
SubViewer 2.0(*.sub/*.txt)
TMPlayer(*.txt)
Dvd Subtitle System(*.txt)
VobSub (*.sub) → Sub/idx, stream based format.
• If there is impossible code to express in the DivX file, it may be displayed as " _ " mark on the display.
• If the frame rate is over 30 frames per second, this unit may not
operate normally.
• If the video and audio structure of recorded file is not interleaved,
either video or audio is outputted.
• If the file is recorded with GMC, the unit supports only 1-point of
the record level.
* GMC?
GMC is the acronym for Global Motion Compensation. It is an encoding tool specified in MPEG4 standard. Some MPEG4 encoder, like
DivX , have this option.
There are different levels of GMC encoding, usually called 1-point, 2point, or 3-point GMC.
Playable Codec format
"DIVX3.xx ", "DIVX4.xx ", "DIVX5.xx ",
"MP43 ", "3IVX ".
Playable Audio format
"Dolby Digital ", "DTS ", "PCM ", "MP3 ", "WMA ".
• Sampling frequency: within 8 - 48 kHz (MP3),
within 32 - 48kHz (WMA)
• Bit rate: within 8 - 320kbps (MP3),
32 - 192kbps (WMA)
34
Playing an USB Flash Drive
This unit can play DivX or MP3/WMA files.
• Do not extract the USB Flash Drive in operating.
• Music files (MP3/WMA), image files (JPEG) and DivX files can
be played.
• The total number of files in a USB Flash Drive should be less
than 650 files.
• Some USB Flash Drive is not supported on this unit.
• This unit supports only USB Flash Drive.
• This unit can support USB1.1.
1. Connect the USB Flash Drive to the USB port on the unit after
power is on.
2. Press MODE on the unit.
The mode selection menu appears on the screen.
For details on each operations item,
refer to relevant page. (See pages 24-34)
3. Select the USB using b / B buttons and press ENTER.
The file or folder list in USB Flash Drive appears on the
screen.
4. If you want to change the other mode, select the other mode in
mode selection menu.
To Remove the USB Flash Drive from the unit
1. Follow step 4 as shown above, to exit the menu.
2. Remove the USB Flash Drive from the unit.
35
Advanced Operations
NOTES
Game
1. Press SETUP. The Setup menu appears.
You can enjoy this game by deleting all balls on screen. Move the
cursor to select a ball you want to delete. And press Enter twice,
the selected ball will be deleted. Only when more than two balls of
the same color are connected, you can delete all of them.
When all balls on screen are deleted, you can move to the next
stage.
2. Use v / V to select the “Other” option then press B to move to
the second level.
Key configuration:
Game
You can play 5 games With this DVD player
To play a game :
RETURN: Cancel the Selection.
ENTER: Select.
b / B / v / V: Move the Cursor.
3. Use v / V to select the “GAME” option then press B to move
to the third level.
4. Press ENTER when the “Select” option is highlighted. The game
menu appears on the TV screen.
Acorn
5. Use v / V to select the desired game then press ENTER.
6. Press RETURN. The Return menu appears.
Use b / B to select the “Yes” option then press ENTER to
return to the previous.
Same game
The basical game instruction is to collect the acorn. When you
clear a stage, next stage will start with increased numbers of
acorns to collect and faster game speed. When you clear the
stage 10, the game menu option appears on the TV screen.
Key configuration:
b: Moves the unit to the left.
B: Moves the unit to the right.
36
Game (Continued)
Key configuration:
b / B / v / V: Move the Cursor.
ENTER: Select.
1 (HELP): A removable block is automatically selected.
2 (BACK): A block deleted a short time ago is restored.
Black jack is a card game. The one whose cards add closest to 21
wins the game. The player and the banker get dealt two cards
each. The player then chooses to receive another card (Hit) or use
what was dealt (Stand). You can get as many cards as you can.
Othello
Key configuration:
ENTER: Start game
b: Hit
B: Stand
v / V: Adjusts amount of money to bet from 10G to 100G.
Shanghai
How to play Othello is that you place one of your chips on the
board, adjacent to an opponent’s chip so as to capture the opponent’s line of chips betweeen one of your own already on the
board and the new one. This play continues until the board is completely full of chips.
Key configuration:
ENTER: Select.
b / B / v / V: Move the Cursor.
37
Advanced Operations
You can enjoy this game by selecting and deleting same two
blocks. Move the cursor to select the first block and second block
that you want to delete, then you can delete the two blocks. The
two blocks can be selected when those blocks are connected with
a line whose direction is shifted only twice. When all blocks on
screen are deleted, you can move to the next stage.
Black jack
Setting up the Player
The picture and sound of a nearby TV, VCR, or radio may be
distorted during playback. If this occurs, position the player away
from the TV, VCR, or radio, or turn off the unit after removing the
disc.
Rear of TV
AV output Connections
Depending on your TV and other equipment there are various
ways you can connect the unit. Please refer to the manuals of
your TV, stereo system or other devices as necessary for
additional connection information.
Audio/Video cable
(Supplied)
AV output Connections to Your TV
1. Set the Mode selection menu to “USB” or “ DISC” mode.
2. Connect the black end of supplied AV cable to the AV IN/OUT
jack on the unit.
3. Connect the yellow end of supplied AV cable to the VIDEO
Input jack on your TV.
4. Connect the red and white ends of supplied AV cable to the
AUDIO Input jacks on your TV.
Right side of unit
NOTE
Make sure the DVD player is connected directly to the TV and not
to a VCR, otherwise the DVD image could be distorted by the
copy protection system.
38
Setting up the Player (Continued)
AV input Connections to Your unit
Connect the input jacks (Audio/Video) on the unit to the
audio/video out jacks on your external device, using audio/video
cables.
1. Set the Mode selection menu to “AV IN” mode.
2. Connect the black end of supplied AV cable to the AV IN/OUT
jack on the unit.
3. Connect the yellow end of supplied AV cable to the VIDEO
Output jack on your external device.
External Device
4. Connect the red and white ends of supplied AV cable to the
AUDIO Output jacks on your external device.
Audio/ Video cable
(Supplied)
Right side of unit
39
Connections
AV input Connections
Setting up the Player (Continued)
Amplifier equipped with 2-channel analog stereo or Dolby Pro
Logic ll / Pro Logic: Connect the AV IN/OUT jacks on the unit to
the audio left and right IN jacks on your amplifier, receiver, or
stereo system, using the audio cables.
Audio Connection to Optional Equipment
Connect the unit to your optional equipment for audio output.
You must set the Mode selection menu to “USB” or “ DISC” mode.
Amplifier equipped with 2-channel digital stereo (PCM) or
audio / video receiver equipped with a multi-channel decoder
(Dolby Digital™, MPEG 2, or DTS): Connect one of the unit
Coaxial jack to the corresponding in jack on your amplifier. Use an
optional digital audio cable.
Amplifier(Receiver)
COAXIAL
R
DIGITAL INPUT
and/or
L
AUDIO INPUT
Digital Multi-channel sound
A digital multi-channel connection provides the best sound quality.
For this you need a multi-channel audio / video receiver that supports one or more of the audio formats supported by your unit
such as MPEG 2, Dolby Digital and DTS. Check the receiver manual and the logos on the front of the receiver.
Audio/ Video
cable (Supplied)
Coaxial cable
(Not supplied)
NOTES
• If the audio format of the digital output does not match the capabil-
ities of your receiver, the receiver produces a strong, distorted
sound or no sound at all.
• Six Channel Digital Surround Sound via a digital connection can
only be obtained if your receiver is equipped with a Digital Multichannel decoder.
• To see the audio format of the current DVD in the on-screen display, press AUDIO.
Right side of unit
40
Troubleshooting
No picture on the LCD
or TV (including video
from another unit).
•
•
•
•
The
The
The
The
Cause
power cord is disconnected.
battery is discharged.
video cable is not connected securely.
MODE selection is not set correctly.
• LCD mode is set to OFF.
• The TV is not set to receive DVD signal
output.
No sound.
The unit does not start
playback.
No response when buttons are pressed.
The Remote Control
does not work properly.
•
•
•
•
Correction
Plug the power cord into the wall outlet securely.
Recharge the battery.
Connect the video cable into the jacks securely.
Set the MODE correctly.
While you are viewing video from other equipment,
set the MODE to A/V IN mode.
• Select a LCD mode other than OFF.
• Select the appropriate video input mode on the TV
so the picture from the unit appears on the screen.
• The equipment connected with the audio cable • Select the correct input mode of the audio receiver
so you can listen to the sound from the unit.
is not set to receive DVD signal output.
• Connect the audio cable into the jacks securely.
• The audio cables are not connected
securely.
• Insert a playable disc. (Check the disc type and
• An unplayable disc is inserted.
Regional code.)
• Cancel the Rating function or change the rating level.
• The Rating level is set.
• “
” may appear on the screen during operation.
• Some discs prohibit certain operations.
• The Remote Control is too far from the
unit.
41
• Operate the Remote Control within about 23 ft
(7 m).
Reference
Symptom
No power.
Language Codes
Use this list to input your desired language for the following initial settings:
Disc Audio, Disc Subtitle, Disc Menu.
Language
Abkhazian
Afar
Afrikaans
Albanian
Ameharic
Arabic
Armenian
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Basque
Bengali; Bangla
Bhutani
Bihari
Breton
Bulgarian
Burmese
Byelorussian
Cambodian
Catalan
Chinese
Corsican
Croatian
Czech
Danish
Dutch
English
Esperanto
Estonian
Faroese
Code
6566
6565
6570
8381
6577
6582
7289
6583
6588
6590
6665
6985
6678
6890
6672
6682
6671
7789
6669
7577
6765
9072
6779
7282
6783
6865
7876
6978
6979
6984
7079
Language
Fiji
Finnish
French
Frisian
Galician
Georgian
German
Greek
Greenlandic
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hebrew
Hindi
Hungarian
Icelandic
Indonesian
Interlingua
Irish
Italian
Japanese
Javanese
Kannada
Kashmiri
Kazakh
Kirghiz
Korean
Kurdish
Laothian
Latin
Latvian, Lettish
Code
7074
7073
7082
7089
7176
7565
6869
6976
7576
7178
7185
7265
7387
7273
7285
7383
7378
7365
7165
7384
7465
7487
7578
7583
7575
7589
7579
7585
7679
7665
7686
Language
Lingala
Lithuanian
Macedonian
Malagasy
Malay
Malayalam
Maltese
Maori
Marathi
Moldavian
Mongolian
Nauru
Nepali
Norwegian
Oriya
Panjabi
Pashto, Pushto
Persian
Polish
Portuguese
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Rumanian
Russian
Samoan
Sanskrit
Scots Gaelic
Serbian
Serbo-Croatian
Shona
Sindhi
42
Code
7678
7684
7775
7771
7783
7776
7784
7773
7782
7779
7778
7865
7869
7879
7982
8065
8083
7065
8076
8084
8185
8277
8279
8285
8377
8365
7168
8382
8372
8378
8368
Language
Singhalese
Slovak
Slovenian
Somali
Spanish
Sudanese
Swahili
Swedish
Tagalog
Tajik
Tamil
Tatar
Telugu
Thai
Tibetan
Tigrinya
Tonga
Turkish
Turkmen
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapük
Welsh
Wolof
Xhosa
Yiddish
Yoruba
Zulu
Code
8373
8375
8376
8379
6983
8385
8387
8386
8476
8471
8465
8484
8469
8472
6679
8473
8479
8482
8475
8487
8575
8582
8590
8673
8679
6789
8779
8872
7473
8979
9085
Area Codes
Choose an area code from this list.
Code
AF
AR
AU
AT
BE
BT
BO
BR
KH
CA
CL
CN
CO
CG
CR
HR
CZ
DK
EC
EG
SV
Area
Code
Ethiopia
ET
Fiji
FJ
Finland
FI
France
FR
Germany
DE
Great Britain
GB
Greece
GR
Greenland
GL
Herd and Mcdonald Islands HM
Hungary
HU
India
IN
Indonesia
ID
Israel
IL
Italy
IT
Jamaica
JM
Japan
JP
Kenya
KE
Kuwait
KW
Libya
LY
Luxembourg
LU
Area
Malaysia
Maldives
Mexico
Monaco
Mongolia
Morocco
Nepal
Netherlands
Netherlands Antilles
New Zealand
Nigeria
Norway
Oman
Pakistan
Panama
Paraguay
Philippines
Poland
Portugal
Romania
Russian Federation
43
Code
MY
MV
MX
MC
MN
MA
NP
NL
AN
NZ
NG
NO
OM
PK
PA
PY
PH
PL
PT
RO
RU
Area
Saudi Arabia
Senegal
Singapore
Slovak Republic
Slovenia
South Africa
South Korea
Spain
Sri Lanka
Sweden
Switzerland
Thailand
Turkey
Uganda
Ukraine
United States
Uruguay
Uzbekistan
Vietnam
Zimbabwe
Code
SA
SN
SG
SK
SI
ZA
KR
ES
LK
SE
CH
TH
TR
UG
UA
US
UY
UZ
VN
ZW
Reference
Area
Afghanistan
Argentina
Australia
Austria
Belgium
Bhutan
Bolivia
Brazil
Cambodia
Canada
Chile
China
Colombia
Congo
Costa Rica
Croatia
Czech Republic
Denmark
Ecuador
Egypt
El Salvador
Specifications
General
Liquid Crystal Display
Power supply:
DC 9.5V (AC adapter terminal), DC 7.4V (Battery)
Panel size: 7 inches wide (diagonal)
Projection system: R.G.B. stripe
Power consumption: 12W with battery
Driving system: TFT active matrix
Net Weight: 1.60 lbs (0.73 kg) (without battery pack)
Resolution: 234 x 480 x 3 (effective pixel rate: more than
99.99%)
External dimensions (W x H x D):
7.6 x 1.5 x 6.7 inches (195 x 38.5 x 172.6 mm)
Signal system: PAL
Accessories
Laser:
DVD Laser wavelength 662+25 / 662-15 nm
CD Laser wavelength 785+25 / 785-15 nm
• RCA Audio/Video cable...........................................................1
• AC Adapter (DPAC1T) ............................................................1
Frequency range (audio):
DVD linear sound: 48kHz sampling 8 Hz to 20 kHz
96kHz sampling 8 Hz to 44 kHz
• Automotive Adapter (DPDC1) .................................................1
• Battery Pack (DPB27).............................................................1
• Remote control........................................................................1
Signal-to-noise ratio (audio): More than 80 dB
• Battery for Remote control (Lithium Battery) ..........................1
Dynamic range (audio): More than 80 dB
Harmonic distortion (audio): 0.02 %
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
Operating conditions:
Temperature: 5°C to 35°C, Operation status: Horizontal
Connectors
Video input/output (VIDEO In/Out):
1.0 V (p-p), 75 Ω, negative sync., ø3.5mm mini jack x 1
Audio input/output (AUDIO In/Out, analog audio):
2.0 Vrms(1 KHz, 0 dB), ø3.5mm mini jack x 1
P/NO : MFL37883942
Earphone terminal: ø3.5mm stereo mini jack x 2
44
SAFETY PRECAUTION
THIS EQUIPMENT MUST BE DISCONNECTED FROM THE MAINS
POWER SUPPLY WHEN IT IS NOT IN USE. DO NOT ALLOW THIS
UNIT TO BE EXPOSED TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION
TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE THE
COVER. NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS ARE INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
JEDDAH MAIN SERVICE CENTER
P.O.BOX 704, JEDDAH 21421 KINGDOM OF SAUDI
ARABIA
TEL) 02-629-2929
Toll Free 800-244-2929
RIYADH BRANCH SERVICE CENTER
TEL) 01-461-5559 EXT. 119,145
AL KHOBAR BRANCH SERVICE CENTER
TEL) 03-858-0929
The working life of this set is 7 years since the date of delivery to
consumer. Upon the expiry of the said period, it might be unsuitable
for the use according to their designation.
PRECAUTIONS
Please read these precautions before you operate this unit.
• Avoid extreme heat, cold, moisture and dust.
• Avoid using near a magnetic field. (This will adversely affect the
units performance.)
• Be careful when the surface of the case is wiped with a volatile
agent such as benzene, alcohol, thinner, etc. or a chemically
processed cloth, the surface finish may deteriorate or its coating
may peel.
• Use the unit only in a horizontal position, and do not place anything heavy on it.
• Keep the unit away from flower vases, tubs, sinks, etc. If any liquids should spill into unit, serious damage could occur. In that
case, please consult qualified service personnel.
• Do not obstruct the ventilation holes: they prevent overheating.
Even soft materials such as paper and cloth may prevent proper
ventilation of the unit.
• There are no serviceable parts inside. For service, please
contact your service centre.
Printed in China
‫‪DP272B-P-AABSNLW-ARAB‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‪DP272B :‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﻭﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻀﻼ ﺍﻗﺮﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺣﺘﺎﺟﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺮﺿﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺪﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ(‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺼﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺰﻭﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺎً ﻟﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﺮﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء )ﺳﻮﺍء ﺑﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻣﻤﻠﻮء‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء ﻛﺄﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﺯﻫﺎﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ )ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺿﻴﻖ ﻛﺨﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﻛﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺛﻘﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ )ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻜﻔﺎءﺓ ﻭﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﺳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﻳﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺠﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻑ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺮﺯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .Macrovision‬ﻭﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Macrovision‬ﻭﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻙ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺧﺼﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪،Macrovision‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﺧﺺ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Macrovision‬ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻷﻱ ﺳﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻛﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺄﻛﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﺮﺍً‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻣﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻋﺰﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺧﻄﺮﺍً ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺎً‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻥ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻮﺍﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻠﻔﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺰﻗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪.١٩٩٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﺎءﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻮﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺜﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺛﻘﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ )ﻳﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪٣١-٣٠ .................................................................................................. JPEG‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪٣٠ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﻪ ‪٣٠ .........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪٣١ ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪) ZOOM‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪٣١ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٣١ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪ MP3/WMA‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٣١ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪٣١ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪٣٢ .............................................................................................DVD VR‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪٣٤-٣٣ ................................................................................................. DivX‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DivX‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪٣٤ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪٣٥ ................................................................................................. USB Flash‬‬
‫‪٣٧-٣٦ .................................................................................................................. Game‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪٣-٢ ..............................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪٤ ................................................................................................................... ....‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٧-٥ ................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٥ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ‪٥ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪٥ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪٦ ...........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪٧ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ‪٧ ............................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪١١-٨ .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪٩-٨ .........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪١١-١٠ ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪١٥-١٢ ............................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪١٢ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪١٣ .......................................................................................... ..‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٥-١٤ .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٦ ............................................................................................................LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‪١٧ ...................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ‪٣٩-٣٨ ..............................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ‪٣٨ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ‪٣٩ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ‪٤٠ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪٤١ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‪٤٢ ....................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ‪٤٣ ....................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪٤٤ ......................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٨ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ‪٢٣-١٨ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪١٨ .............................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ‪١٩ ................................................................................................................. ....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪١٩ ................................................................................................................. .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪٢٠ ................................................................................................................. .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ )ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ( ‪٢٢-٢١ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪٢٣ ...............................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ‪٢٦-٢٤ .......................................................................................................... .‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ‪٢٧ ................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪٢٨ .................................................................... MP3/WMA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ‪٢٩ .............................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‪٢٩ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٢٩ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ‪٢٩ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﺼﻖ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ » « ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻛﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺎً ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺮﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﺜﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ALL‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD ±R/RW‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ACD‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪MP3‬‬
‫‪WMA‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪WMA‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻗﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﻼء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻨﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )ﻳﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻔﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺗﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺗﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ً‬
‫ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺎ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺒﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺃﺛﺮﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﺮﻃﺒﺔ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﺑﻤﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﻈﻒ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻗﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﻼء ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻫﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻭﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﺃﻥ ﻳﻼﺣﻈﻮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪MP3/WMA‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻟﻤﻨﺢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫)ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ ٨‬ﺳﻢ‪ ١٢ /‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )ﻳﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪(VCD‬‬
‫)ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ ٨‬ﺳﻢ‪ ١٢ /‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ »ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ«‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫)ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ ٨‬ﺳﻢ‪ ١٢ /‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ‪ DVD±R/RW‬ﻭ‪ CD-R/RW‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DivX‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ‪ MP3‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ‪ WMA‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫» ‪) «Check Regional Code‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻨﻊ ﺑﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺒﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ »‪ «Dolby‬ﻭ‬
‫ُ‬
‫»‪ «Pro Logic‬ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ‪ DD‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺒﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪) CD-R/RW‬ﺃﻭ‪ (DVD ±R/RW‬ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪) CD-R/RW‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(DVD ±R/RW‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺘﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ DTS‬ﻭ ‪ DTS Digital Out‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.Digital Theater Systems, Inc‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪) LCD MODE ٣‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫‪) NORMAL‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ( ‪ P‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) OFF P 4:3‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫• ‪) DISPLAY‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪ :‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) MODE‬ﻭﺿﻊ(‪ :‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪) DISC‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪) AV IN‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪.USB‬‬
‫• ‪) SETUP‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) MENU‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪ :‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫• ‪) COLOR/BRIGHT‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‪ :‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪ P‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪ P‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ‪) FLIP‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪ :‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫• ‪) b B v V‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪/‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :b B‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪) COLOR/BRIGHT‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪ :‬ﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺯﺭ ‪) OPEN‬ﻓﺘﺢ(‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪COAXIAL‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﻳﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪AV IN/OUT‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪) VIDEO IN‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ‪) AV IN‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪DC IN ٥‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫)ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫• ‪) (STOP) x‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ :‬ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) (PLAY/PAUSE) B/X‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ‪/‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) .‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ‪/‬ﺑﺤﺚ(‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ*‪/‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• > )ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‪/‬ﺑﺤﺚ( ﺑﺤﺚ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ*‪/‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫* ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :USB ١٠‬ﺻﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪USB Flash‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﻳﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l l l‬‬
‫‪l l‬‬
‫‪١ l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l l l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪) POWER‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﻳﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AUDIO‬ﺻﻮﺕ(‪ :‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪.(DVD‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪) SUBTITLE‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪ :‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ANGLE‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮ ‪ DVD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ‪/‬ﺑﺤﺚ )‪:(.‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ*‪/‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‪/‬ﺑﺤﺚ )>(‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ*‪/‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l l l‬‬
‫‪l l‬‬
‫‪٢ l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪) SETUP‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪) MENU‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪ :‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪)RETURN‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ( )‪:(O‬‬
‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DISPLAY‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪ :‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) b B v V‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪/‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪ :‬ﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪) (X) PAUSE/STEP‬ﺇﺷﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً‪/‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) PLAY‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )‪ :(N‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) (x) STOP‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ :‬ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪:٩‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) PROG.‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ :‬ﻳﻀﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪) CLEAR‬ﻣﺴﺢ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﺴﺢ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪) MARKER SEARCH‬ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪) (t / T) SLOW‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻄﻲء(‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ‪/‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﺒﻂء‪.‬‬
‫‪l l l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l l l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l ٣‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l l l l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l l l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l ٤‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l l l l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪) TITLE‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ(‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) REPEAT‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‪ :‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :A-B‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ZOOM‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪ :‬ﻳﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) MARKER‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ(‪ :‬ﻳﻀﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) SEARCH‬ﺑﺤﺚ(‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪MARKER SEARCH‬‬
‫)ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) RANDOM‬ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪REPEAT‬‬
‫‪PROG‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪PROG‬‬
‫‪PROG‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪CLEAR‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪CLEAR‬‬
‫‪CLEAR‬‬
‫‪SETUP‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﻳﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ(‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ(‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺸﺒﻜﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ +‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ +‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ CR. 2025‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﻼﻣﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻟﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻤﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪.‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻜﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺨﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ) ‪ ٢١٢‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﻴﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﻊ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫)‪ ،Matsushita Elec. Ind. Co., Ltd. (Panasonic‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪ CR. 2025‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬ﺍﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﻜﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻟﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Å‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺯﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﺎﻡ‪.‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻳﺪﺍﻙ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺪ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ‪.A ١٫٥ Hz ٦٠/٥٠ ~ V ٢٤٠ -١٠٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪WANLIDA Digital Technology Co., Ltd‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪DC IN‬‬
‫)ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ( ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً‬
‫ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻭﻻﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﺎﺋﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﺠﻬﺪ ‪ ١٦-٨٫٥‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻭﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ )ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﺗﻚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻭﻻﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﺎﺋﺮ‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ‪ ٤ A‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺪ ‪ ٢٥٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺼﻬﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ٧٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ) ‪ ١٥٨‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﻴﺖ( ﻭﺇﻻ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﻭﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺸﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺠﻬﺪ ‪ ١٦-٨٫٥‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪WANLIDA Digital Technology Co., Ltd‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪DC IN‬‬
‫)ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ( ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﻻﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﺎﺋﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ )ﻳﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ )ﻳﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻔﻚ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺬﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Å‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺧﻄﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺎﻓﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Å‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﻔﺎﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻓﺎﻥ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺋﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﺩﻉ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺎﺋﺰ ﻗﺎﻧﻮ ًﻧﺎ‪.‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ )ﻳﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ Å‬ﺷﺤﻦ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺻﻞ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Å‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ *‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻭﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪Å‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻏﻴﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ )‪ ١٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﻴﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻨﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻔﻜﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪“Check Battery Status‬‬
‫“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻓﺤﺺ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ”‬
‫‪ Å‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺾ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺃﻭﺷﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﺩ )ﺗﺠﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﺮﺓ(‬
‫‪ Å‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫• ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺭﻳﺔﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺟﺰءًﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻮءﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻌ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻔﺼﻮﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻐﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﺪ‪ .‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺻﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) MODE‬ﻭﺿﻊ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪) DISC‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪) AV IN‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OPEN‬ﻓﺘﺢ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ )ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺫﻭ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(‪،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ »‪) «CHECK DISC‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ( ﺃﻭ »‪) «DISC ERROR‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻗﺮﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪) MODE‬ﻭﺿﻊ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) (N) PLAY‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻏﻠﻘﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Å‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪) LCD MODE‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) NORMAL‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ( ‪ P‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) OFF P 4:3‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ b / B‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪) DISC‬ﻗﺮﺹ(‪ :‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪) AV IN‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ :‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :USB‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ USB Flash‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ١٩‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٢٣‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) DISPLAY‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) SETUP‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SETUP‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ B‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ b‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ v / V‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.b / B‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﻣﺴﺎﺭ( ‪ -‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ(‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬
‫)ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ -‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ -‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) SETUP‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ v / V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ B‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ v / V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ B‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ v / V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) SETUP‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﺃﻭ ‪) PLAY‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )‪ (N‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :٣:٤‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻫﻮ ‪ ٣:٤‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪/‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪ :٩:١٦‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻫﻮ ‪.٩:١٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻀﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪) TV Aspect‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ( ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،٩:١٦‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪Display Mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Widescreen‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ :‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .٤٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) CLEAR‬ﻣﺴﺢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ »‪.«٣:٤‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ -‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Letterbox‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Panscan‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻭﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍءﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ )ﻳﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ(‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ .DVD‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪) AUDIO‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪٩٦‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪٤٨‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ٩٦‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ٩٦‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ٩٦‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DRC‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻺﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ )ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻫﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻧﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ‪ DRC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪On‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﻟﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪MPEG / DTS /‬‬
‫‪Vocal‬‬
‫‪) Bitstream‬ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ(‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ »‪) «Bitstream‬ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪DIGITAL OUT‬‬
‫ً‬
‫)ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻟﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DTS‬ﺃﻭ ‪MPEG‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Vocal‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﺎﺭﻭﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﻭﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻤﺘﺰﺝ ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪) PCM‬ﻟﺪﻭﻟﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ :(MPEG/‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺫﻱ ‪ ٢‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻭﻟﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ MPEG‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ ٢ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﻟـ ‪ :(DTS‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ »‪) «Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ DTS‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪) DIGITAL OUT‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ )ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٨-١‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭﻱ ‪.v / V‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ ‪ :٨-١‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ )‪ (١‬ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ )‪ (٨‬ﻫﻮ ﺃﺧﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ )ﻳﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫‪) Unlock‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ(‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) Unlock‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﺉ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻨﺴﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) SETUP‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻗﻮﺍﻟﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ »‪) «Rating‬ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ( ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) LOCK‬ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.B‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻭﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪) Rating‬ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ( ﻭ‪) Password‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ( ﻭ‬
‫‪) Country Code‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰﺍً ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .ENTER‬ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪،ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) CLEAR‬ﻣﺴﺢ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ )ﻳﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫‪.‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ )ﺭﻣﺰ( ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٣‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ »‪) «Password‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ( ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) LOCK‬ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.B‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ »‪) «Area Code‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) LOCK‬ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.B‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴـ ﺭ »‪ .«New‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭﻱ ‪.v / V‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.v / V‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺧﻴـ ﺭ »‪ «Change‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪.‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SETUP‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻧﺴﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺴﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) SETUP‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ »‪ ،«210499‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪DivX(R) VOD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ PBC‬ﻭ‪) Game‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ( ﻭ‪.Divx (R) VOD‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﺰﻭﺩﻙ ﺑﻜﻮﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪) DivX® VOD‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ( ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺌﺠﺎﺭ ﻭﺷﺮﺍء ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ . DivX® VOD‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫‪.www.divx.com/vod‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ »‪ «DivX(R) VOD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.B‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ »ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ« ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫‪ DivX® VOD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪ www.divx.com/vod‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ DivX® VOD‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) PBC‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ )‪ (PBC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪Game‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ »‪ «Game‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٧-٣٦‬‬
‫‪ :Select‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪) PBC‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ( ﻃﺒﻘﺎً ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪)PBC‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ( ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ )ﻳﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) TITLE‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ( ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ b BvV‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) TITLE‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ( ﺃﻭ ‪) MENU‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) DISPLAY‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )‪ (٩-٠‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ b/B‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) CHAPTER/TRACK‬ﻓﺼﻞ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭ( ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪RETURN‬‬
‫)ﺭﺟﻮﻉ( ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪) PBC‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ »‪) «PBC‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ( ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٣‬‬
‫‪ALL‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ >) SKIP/SEARCH‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (.‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) SKIP‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ( ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎً ﻭﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪) .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ »‪) «Lock Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ( ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(.٢٢-٢١‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫‪ALL‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ >) SKIP/SEARCH‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (.‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) SEARCH‬ﺑﺤﺚ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻘﺮﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻫﻮ ‪) ٢‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ >) SKIP/SEARCH‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (.‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ‪DivX‬؛ ‪ ٤‬ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻭ‪ MP3‬ﻭ‪ WMA‬ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ؛ ‪ ٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) SEARCH‬ﺑﺤﺚ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.(N) PLAY‬‬
‫‪ALL‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪) STOP‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( )ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) RESUME‬ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ((‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،(N) PLAY‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SLOW‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻄﻲء( )‪ T‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (t‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) SLOW‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻄﻲء(‪.‬‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﻭﻗﺮﺹ؛ ‪ ٤‬ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭ‪DivX‬؛ ‪ ٤‬ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ )ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.(N) PLAY‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ALL‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ REPEAT‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ DVD :‬ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ : WMA/MP3/DivX‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) (X) PAUSE/STEP‬ﺇﺷﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) (X) PAUSE/STEP‬ﺇﺷﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.(N) PLAY‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) DISPLAY‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ‪) Time Search‬ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ‪A-B‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ)>( ‪ SKIP‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ )ﻣﺴﺎﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ZOOM‬ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ ٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.b B v V‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) CLEAR‬ﻣﺴﺢ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) CLEAR‬ﻣﺴﺢ( ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺫﻱ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪) PBC‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ PBC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ »‪) «PBC‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ( ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٣‬‬
‫‪) Zoom‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ v / V‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‪.“--:--:-‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ALL‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ACD‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ A-B‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ A‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ B‬ﻭﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪) A‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪) B‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ A-B‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ )ﻳﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ )ﻳﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Title‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) SUBTITLE‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ،DivX‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ »‪ «١‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) MENU‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪) MENU‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) AUDIO‬ﺻﻮﺕ( ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ )‪) Main (L‬ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ )‪) Bilingual (R‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ )‪) (Main +Bilingual‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ‪ +‬ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ( ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) AUDIO‬ﺻﻮﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) AUDIO‬ﺻﻮﺕ( ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻉ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫)‪) STEREO‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪) LEFT‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪) RIGHT‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ((‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) ANGLE‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ( ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪VCD1.1‬‬
‫‪ACD‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺂﺧﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻈﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻧﺰﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺉ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) MARKER‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) SEARCH‬ﺑﺤﺚ(‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ b/B‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ‪ٍ ٩‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﻭﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) CLEAR‬ﻣﺴﺢ( ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻢ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ )‪.(DVD‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) title‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪MP3/WMA‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ MP3 /WMA‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ‪ Audio CD‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.MP3/WMA‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ‪MP3/WMA /‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3/WMA‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ v/V‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) PLAY‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )‪ (N‬ﺃﻭ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٥-٢٤‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻕ ‪ ٤٨- ٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪،(MP3‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ٤٨-٣٢‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪(WMA‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻕ ‪ ٣٢٠-٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪،(MP3‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ١٩٢ - ٣٢‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪(WMA‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3/WMA‬ﺑﺎﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ‬
‫»‪.«.mp3.»/«wma‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-R‬ﻫﻮ ‪ISO 9660‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3 /WMA‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ‪ ،(Direct-CD‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ .MP3 /WMA‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ ،Easy-CD Creator‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪.ISO 9660‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ‪ ١٦‬ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‪ mp3.‬ﺃﻭ‪.wma.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ID3‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ I < > “ : * ? /‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) DISPLAY‬ﻋﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Title, Artist, Album, Year, Comment‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ ٦٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺻﺎ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻔﺎء ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ‪ CD-R‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪(WMA‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ( ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ »‪«NO ID3 TAG‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ (ID3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ MUSIC‬ﻭﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Folder‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ v/V‬ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) MENU‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3/WMA‬ﻭ ‪JPEG‬ﻭ‪ ،MOVIE‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪ MUSIC‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ PHOTO‬ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪.MOVIE‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TITLE‬ﻭ‪MUSIC‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻠﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ PHOTO‬ﺃﻭ ‪ MOVIE‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺓﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍً‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) REPEAT‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) Track‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭ(‪ :‬ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) All‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ :‬ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ(‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺮﺻﺎً ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺎً ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.MP3/WMA‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) AUDIO CD‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺕ( ﺃﻭ ‪) MUSIC‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) PROG.‬ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ(‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪. E‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ > ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) PROG.‬ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ E‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Program Edit‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) PROG.‬ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ(‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪. E‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ v V b B‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Program‬ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) CLEAR‬ﻣﺴﺢ(‪ .‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ ٣-١‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪MP3/WMA‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) PROG.‬ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ(‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪. E‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ v V b B‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ »‪) «Clear All‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍً ﻓﻲ »‪) «List‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ »‪) «Program‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ .‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.B‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ »‪) «Program‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (N) PLAY‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﻘﺎً ﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ »‪) «Program‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍً ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.(N) PLAY‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) MENU‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ .JPEG‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) PHOTO‬ﺻﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ <<< :‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ )‪(Fast‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫<< ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )‪ < (Normal‬ﺑﻄﺊ )‪.(Slow‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ b/B‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ v V b B‬ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ v/V‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍً‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .ENTER‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Folder‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ( ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ v/V‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪) MUSIC‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪) PHOTO‬ﺻﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪) MOVIE‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ MP3/WMA‬ﻭ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪) MOVIE‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) TITLE‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ( ﻣﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪) MUSIC‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪) PHOTO‬ﺻﻮﺭ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪) MOVIE‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (O) RETURN‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ v/V‬ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪) PLAY‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )‪.(N‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ v V b B‬ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (x) STOP‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) PHOTO‬ﺻﻮﺭ((‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﻪ‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) (X) PAUSE/STEP‬ﺇﺷﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) PLAY‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )‪ (N‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪) (X) PAUSE/STEP‬ﺇﺷﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪) JPEG‬ﻳﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) SKIP/SEARCH‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪ /‬ﺑﺤﺚ( )> ﺃﻭ ‪ (.‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ )‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (b‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﻗﺘﺎً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻋﺮﺿﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ ٢٠٤٨ x ٢٧٦٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺮﻕ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ ٦٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎً‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ »‪ «.jpg‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻫﻮ »‪ «.jpe‬ﺃﻭ »‪ ،«.jpeg‬ﻓﺄﻋﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ »‪.«.jpg‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ »‪.«.jpg‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺮﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪) Zoom‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ZOOM‬ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ ٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.b B v V‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) CLEAR‬ﻣﺴﺢ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ v/V‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪ MP3/WMA‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪ MP3/WMA‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) TITLE‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) PHOTO‬ﺻﻮﺭ( ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ZOOM‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ( ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ v/V‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ B‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) STOP‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( )‪ (x‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) PHOTO‬ﺻﻮﺭ((‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫”‪) “MUSIC‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪DVD VR‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺸﻐﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫)‪)Video Recording (VR‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ﻭﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ DVD-VR‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ً‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ v/V‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) (N) PLAY‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻭﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD-R/RW‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪DVD-Video‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD-R/RW‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD-VR‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ CPRM‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫‪ .(DVD RECORDER) DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ >‪? <CPRM‬‬
‫‪ CPRM‬ﻫﻮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺰﺍﺣﻢ( ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ »ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ« ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ CPRM‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،CPRM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﺚ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.DivX‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪DivX Movie‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SUBTITLE‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ b/B‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ DivX‬ﺍﻟُﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) MOVIE‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) MENU‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ v/V‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .ENTER‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Folder‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪v/V‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ v/V‬ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺃﻭ ‪) (N) PLAY‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٧-٢٤‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) MOVIE‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) STOP‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( )‪.(x‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪) MUSIC‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪) PHOTO‬ﺻﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪) MOVIE‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ MP3/WMA‬ﻭ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪) MOVIE‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) TITLE‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ( ﻣﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪) MUSIC‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪) PHOTO‬ﺻﻮﺭ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪) MOVIE‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻥ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺇﻧﺰﺍﻝ ‪ DivX‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ DivX‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ‪ DivX‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪) DivX Movie‬ﻳﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ DivX‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫”‪ “.avi‬ﺃﻭ ‪ “.mpg”،‬ﺃﻭ ‪“.mpeg”،‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DivX‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ DivX‬ﺗﺤﺖ ‪)٥٧٦ x ٧٢٠‬ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ x‬ﻃﻮﻝ( ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)‪SubRip(*.srt/*.txt‬‬
‫)‪SAMI(*smi‬‬
‫)‪SubStation Alpha(*.ssa/*.txt‬‬
‫)‪MicroDVD(*.sub/*.txt‬‬
‫)‪SubViewer 2.0(*.sub/*.txt‬‬
‫)‪TMPlayer(*.txt‬‬
‫)‪Dvd Subtitle System(*.txt‬‬
‫‪VobSub (*.sub) b Sub/idx, stream based format‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪ DivX‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ٥٦‬ﺣﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ،DivX‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻌﻼﻣﺔ »_« ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ ﻣﻌﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻼ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ ،GMC‬ﻓﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ ١‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻮﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫”‪ “DIVX5.xx” ، “DIVX4.xx” ، “DIVX3.xx‬ﺃﻭ ‪“3IVX” ، “MP43” ،‬‬
‫* ‪GMC‬؟‬
‫‪ GMC‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ‪Global Motion Compensation‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ .MPEG4‬ﻭﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﻔﺮﻱ‬
‫‪ ،MPEG4‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪.DivX‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ‪ ،GMC‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ‪-١‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪-٢‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪-٣‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪.GMC‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫”‪“WMA”، “MP3”، “PCM”، “DTS”، “Dolby Digital‬‬
‫• ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻕ ‪ ٤٨-٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪،(MP3‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ٤٨- ٣٢‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪(WMA‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻕ ‪ ٣٢٠- ٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪،(MP3‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ١٩٢- ٣٢‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪(WMA‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ USB Flash‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ )‪ ،(WMA/MP٣‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ (JPEG‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.Divx‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ USB Flash‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٦٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ‪.USB Flash‬‬
‫• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ USB Flash‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﻋﻢ ‪.١٫١ USB‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ‪ DivX‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.MP3/WMA‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺻﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ USB Flash‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ MODE‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪) .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(٣٤-٢٤‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ b / B‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ USB Flash‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﻚ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ USB Flash‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 4‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﻚ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ USB Flash‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪USB Flash‬‬
‫‪Game‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ٍﺬ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻠﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Game‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻠﻌﺐ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻌﻠﺐ‬
‫ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪:‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) SETUP‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) SETUP‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ‪ v/V‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ »‪ «Other‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻎ ﻁ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ B‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ‪ v/V‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ »‪) «GAME‬ﻟﻌﺒﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ B‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ »‪) «Select‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ(‪٤ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ‪ v/V‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) RETURN‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ(‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Return‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ b / B‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ”‪) “Yes‬ﻧﻌﻢ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪:‬‬
‫‪) Return‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ(‪ :‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ :ENTER‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :b / B / v / V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪Acron‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ‪) Same‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻁ ﻭﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ‪ ، ١٠‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪:‬‬
‫‪ :b‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫‪) Game‬ﻳﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫‪Black jack‬‬
‫‪ :b / B / v / V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ENTER‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) (HELP) .١‬ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ(‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪) (BACK).٢‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ(‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Black jack‬ﻫﻲ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻗﻪ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢١‬ﻳﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺐ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺤﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪ (Hit‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﻪ )‪ .(Stand‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪:‬‬
‫‪ :ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫‪ :b‬ﺳﺤﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ :B‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ :v/V‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺮﻫﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.١٠٠‬‬
‫‪Othello‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻢ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺤﺒﺲ ﺧﻂ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ‪) Shanghai‬ﺷﻨﻐﻬﺎﻱ(‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪:‬‬
‫‪ :ENTER‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :b / B / v / V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ٍﺬ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺨﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ‪ VCR‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ‪ VCR‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻭﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ”‪ “USB‬ﺃﻭ ” ‪) “DISC‬ﻗﺮﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪) AV IN/OUT‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪) VIDEO Input‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺴﻲ ‪) VIDEO Input‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ /‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺑـ ‪ ،VCR‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎً ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ )ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺍﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ /‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ”‪) “AV IN‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫‪) AV IN/OUT‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪) VIDEO output‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺴﻲ‬
‫‪) VIDEO output‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ )ﻳﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ )ﻳﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ ‪-٢‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ‪:Pro Logic / Dolby Pro Logic ll‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺴﻲ ‪ AV IN/OUT‬ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺴﻲ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ DISC‬ﺃﻭ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ‪-٢‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ )‪ (PCM‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻚ‬
‫ﺷﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ )‪ ،™Dolby Digital‬ﺃﻭ‪ ، MPEG 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪:(DTS‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺘﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ )ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ(‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍً ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ، MPEG 2‬ﻭﺩﻭﻟﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭ‪ .DTS‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪AUDIO INPUT‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ /‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪DIGITAL INPUT‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻌﻄﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺸﻮﻩ‬
‫ﻗﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺻﻮﺗﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﺠﺴﻢ ﻟﺴﺘﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺍً ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺘﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫• ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) AUDIO‬ﺻﻮﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫)ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫• ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺼﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ MODE‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ MODE‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A/V‬‬
‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﺎً ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ً‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ» « ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫• ﺷﻐﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﻯ ‪ ٢٣‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ )‪ ٧‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﺨﺎﺫﻳﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﺮﻳﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﻬﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻣﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻣﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻴﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺫﺭﺑﻴﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺸﻜﻴﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺳﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻬﺎﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻬﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﻄﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻐﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻼﺭﻭﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﻻﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺳﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻧﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺒﺮﺍﻧﺘﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻭﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪6566‬‬
‫‪6565‬‬
‫‪6570‬‬
‫‪8381‬‬
‫‪6577‬‬
‫‪6582‬‬
‫‪7289‬‬
‫‪6583‬‬
‫‪6588‬‬
‫‪6590‬‬
‫‪6665‬‬
‫‪6985‬‬
‫‪6678‬‬
‫‪6890‬‬
‫‪6672‬‬
‫‪6682‬‬
‫‪6671‬‬
‫‪7789‬‬
‫‪6669‬‬
‫‪7577‬‬
‫‪6765‬‬
‫‪9072‬‬
‫‪6779‬‬
‫‪7282‬‬
‫‪6783‬‬
‫‪6865‬‬
‫‪7876‬‬
‫‪6978‬‬
‫‪6979‬‬
‫‪6984‬‬
‫‪7079‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﻳﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻴﺸﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺮﻳﻨﻼﻧﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻮﺍﺭﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺟﺎﺭﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻭﺳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺪﻭﻧﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻟﻴﻨﺠﻮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﺩﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻤﻴﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺯﺍﺧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺮﻏﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻨﺠﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻻﺟﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻻﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻄﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺭﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺭﺍﺛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻟﺪﻓﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻐﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺍﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻴﺒﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﻳﺠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺷﺘﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻮﻳﺘﺸﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺘﻮ ﺭﻣﺎﻭﻧﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻣﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻧﺴﻜﺮﻳﺘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺳﻜﺘﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻳﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺮﺏ‪-‬ﻛﺮﻭﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪7074‬‬
‫‪7073‬‬
‫‪7082‬‬
‫‪7089‬‬
‫‪7176‬‬
‫‪7565‬‬
‫‪6869‬‬
‫‪6976‬‬
‫‪7576‬‬
‫‪7178‬‬
‫‪7185‬‬
‫‪7265‬‬
‫‪7387‬‬
‫‪7273‬‬
‫‪7285‬‬
‫‪7383‬‬
‫‪7378‬‬
‫‪7365‬‬
‫‪7165‬‬
‫‪7384‬‬
‫‪7465‬‬
‫‪7487‬‬
‫‪7578‬‬
‫‪7583‬‬
‫‪7575‬‬
‫‪7589‬‬
‫‪7579‬‬
‫‪7585‬‬
‫‪7679‬‬
‫‪7665‬‬
‫‪7686‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪7678‬‬
‫‪7684‬‬
‫‪7775‬‬
‫‪7771‬‬
‫‪7783‬‬
‫‪7776‬‬
‫‪7784‬‬
‫‪7773‬‬
‫‪7782‬‬
‫‪7779‬‬
‫‪7778‬‬
‫‪7865‬‬
‫‪7869‬‬
‫‪7879‬‬
‫‪7982‬‬
‫‪8065‬‬
‫‪8083‬‬
‫‪7065‬‬
‫‪8076‬‬
‫‪8084‬‬
‫‪8185‬‬
‫‪8277‬‬
‫‪8279‬‬
‫‪8285‬‬
‫‪8377‬‬
‫‪8365‬‬
‫‪7168‬‬
‫‪8382‬‬
‫‪8372‬‬
‫‪8378‬‬
‫‪8368‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺣﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺟﺎﻟﻮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺟﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺗﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻮﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺠﺮﻳﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻧﺠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻛﺮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺑﻜﺴﺘﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺘﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻻﺑﻮﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻮﻓﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻭﺳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻴﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪8373‬‬
‫‪8375‬‬
‫‪8376‬‬
‫‪8379‬‬
‫‪6983‬‬
‫‪8385‬‬
‫‪8387‬‬
‫‪8386‬‬
‫‪8476‬‬
‫‪8471‬‬
‫‪8465‬‬
‫‪8484‬‬
‫‪8469‬‬
‫‪8472‬‬
‫‪6679‬‬
‫‪8473‬‬
‫‪8479‬‬
‫‪8482‬‬
‫‪8475‬‬
‫‪8487‬‬
‫‪8575‬‬
‫‪8582‬‬
‫‪8590‬‬
‫‪8673‬‬
‫‪8679‬‬
‫‪6789‬‬
‫‪8779‬‬
‫‪8872‬‬
‫‪7473‬‬
‫‪8979‬‬
‫‪9085‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻐﺎﻧﺴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻨﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺴﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻠﺠﻴﻜﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻮﻟﻴﻔﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﺯﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺩﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻮﻟﻮﻣﺒﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻧﻐﻮ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺳﺘﺎﺭﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺍﻭﺗﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻤﺎﺭﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻛﻮﺍﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻔﺎﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪AU‬‬
‫‪AT‬‬
‫‪BE‬‬
‫‪BT‬‬
‫‪BO‬‬
‫‪BR‬‬
‫‪KH‬‬
‫‪CA‬‬
‫‪CL‬‬
‫‪CN‬‬
‫‪CO‬‬
‫‪CG‬‬
‫‪CR‬‬
‫‪HR‬‬
‫‪CZ‬‬
‫‪DK‬‬
‫‪EC‬‬
‫‪EG‬‬
‫‪SV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻴﻮﺑﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺠﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻨﻠﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻈﻤﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻧﺪﻭﺳﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺮﺍﺋﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﺎﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻨﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺒﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻛﺴﻤﺒﻮﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﺪﻳﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺴﻴﻜﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﺎﻛﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻐﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻐﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻫﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺭ ﺃﻧﺘﻴﻠﻴﺰ ﺑﻬﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻼﻧﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺠﻴﺮﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﻳﺞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻧﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺍﺟﻮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺒﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻮﻻﻧﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻐﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪ET‬‬
‫‪FJ‬‬
‫‪FI‬‬
‫‪FR‬‬
‫‪DE‬‬
‫‪GB‬‬
‫‪GR‬‬
‫‪GL‬‬
‫‪HM‬‬
‫‪HU‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫‪ID‬‬
‫‪IL‬‬
‫‪IT‬‬
‫‪JM‬‬
‫‪JP‬‬
‫‪KE‬‬
‫‪KW‬‬
‫‪LY‬‬
‫‪LU‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪MY‬‬
‫‪MV‬‬
‫‪MX‬‬
‫‪MC‬‬
‫‪MN‬‬
‫‪MA‬‬
‫‪NP‬‬
‫‪NL‬‬
‫‪AN‬‬
‫‪NZ‬‬
‫‪NG‬‬
‫‪NO‬‬
‫‪OM‬‬
‫‪PK‬‬
‫‪PA‬‬
‫‪PY‬‬
‫‪PH‬‬
‫‪PL‬‬
‫‪PT‬‬
‫‪RO‬‬
‫‪RU‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻐﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺳﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻮﻓﻴﻨﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺮﻳﻼﻧﻜﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻳﺴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻏﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻛﺮﺍﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺭﺟﻮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺯﺑﺎﻛﺴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺘﻨﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺯﻳﻤﺒﺎﺑﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪SA‬‬
‫‪SN‬‬
‫‪SG‬‬
‫‪SK‬‬
‫‪SI‬‬
‫‪ZA‬‬
‫‪KR‬‬
‫‪ES‬‬
‫‪LK‬‬
‫‪SE‬‬
‫‪CH‬‬
‫‪TH‬‬
‫‪TR‬‬
‫‪UG‬‬
‫‪UA‬‬
‫‪US‬‬
‫‪UY‬‬
‫‪UZ‬‬
‫‪VN‬‬
‫‪ZW‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﻳﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ ٩٫٥‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ ٧٫٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )ﺑﻄﺎﺭﺑﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ ٧‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )ﻗﻄﺮﻱ(‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ :‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ‪R.G.B‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ ١٢ :‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ TFT :‬ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻲ‪ ١٫٦٠ :‬ﺭﻃﻞ )‪ ٠٫٧٣‬ﻛﺠﻢ( )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ‪) ٣ x ٤٨٠ x ٢٣٤ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪:‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪(%٩٩.٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ‪ x‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ x‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ(‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٦٫٧ x ١٫٥ x ٧٫٦‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ ١٧٢٫٦ x ٣٨٫٥ x ١٩٥‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪PAL :‬‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪١ ...................................................................... RCA Audio/Video‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﻲ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ‪ ١٥ - ٦٦٢ / ٢٥ + ٦٦٢‬ﻧﺎﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ CD‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﻲ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ‪ ١٥ -٧٨٥ / ٢٥ + ٧٨٥‬ﻧﺎﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫• ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪١ ................................................................. (DPAC1T‬‬
‫• ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ )‪١ ..........................................................................(DPDC1‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪١ .................................................................................(DPB27‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻲ‪ ٤٨ :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ‪ ٨‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٩٦‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ‪ ٨‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٤‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪١ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ(‪١ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء )ﺻﻮﺗﻲ(‪ :‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٨٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )ﺻﻮﺗﻲ(‪ :‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٨٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﻲ )ﺻﻮﺗﻲ(‪% ٠٫٠٢ :‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ‪ ٥ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ /‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪:(VIDEO In/Out‬‬
‫‪ ، Ω ٧٥ ،(p-p)١٫٠‬ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ‪ ٣٫٥ ø.‬ﻣﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ‪١ x‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ /‬ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ )ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﺛﻞ(‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٢٫٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )‪ ١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ٠ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﺒﻴﻞ( ‪ ٣٫٥ ø‬ﻣﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ‪١ x‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺫﻥ ‪ ٣٫٥ ø :‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ‪٢ x‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز ﻋﻦ ﻣﺨﺮج اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺪم اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻬﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﻼﻣﻄﺎر أو اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ ﻣﻨﻊ وﻗﻮع اﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺤﺐ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
‫اﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺪاﺧﻞ أﺟﺰاء ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام‪ .‬اﻟﺘﺼﻠﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﻪ اﻟﺸﺨﺺ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺟﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺎت‬
‫ص ب ‪ ٧٠٤‬ﺟﺪة ‪ ، ٢١٤٢١‬اﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪(٠٢) ٦٢٩-٢٩٢٩ :‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻲ ‪٨٠٠ ٢٤٤ ٢٩٢٩ :‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ اﻟﺮﻳﺎض اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺎت‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ / ٠١-٤٦١-٥٥٥٩‬ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ‪١١٩٬١٤٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ اﳋﺒﺮ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺎت‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪٠٣ - ٨٥٨ - ٠٩٢٩‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺮة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز ﺳﺒﻊ ﺳﻨﻮات ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ اﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ اﻟﻰ اﻟﺰﺑﻮن‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫إﻧﺘﻬﺎء اﻟﻔﺘﺮة اﶈﺪدة أﻋﻼه رﲟﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻮد ﺻـﺎﳊﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻮاﺻﻔﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮات ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫إﻗﺮاء ﻫﺬه اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫• ﲡﻨﺐ درﺟﺎت اﳊﺮارة أو اﻟﺒﺮودة اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ واﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ واﻟﻐﺒﺎر‪.‬‬
‫• ﲡﻨﺐ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ) ﺳﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ اﳒﺎز اﳉﻬﺎز(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎذر ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ اﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﻌﺎدة ﻣﺘﻄﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ واﻟﻜﺤﻮل اﻟﺦ أو ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎش ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ‬
‫ﲟﻮاد ﻛﻴﻤﺎوﻳﺔ‪ .‬رﲟﺎ ﻳﺆدي ذﻟﻚ اﻟﻰ اﺗﻼف ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻐﻄﺎء أو ﺗﻘﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻄﻼء‪.‬‬
‫• اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ أﻓﻘﻲ وﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ أي ﺷﺊ ﺛﻘﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ وﺿﻊ اﳉﻬﺎز ﺑﻌﻴﺪاً ﻋﻦ أﺣﻮاض اﻟﺰﻫﻮر وأﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ اﳌﺎء وﺣﻮض اﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‪ .‬اذا‬
‫ﺳ ﻘ ﻂ ﻋ ﻠ ﻴ ﻪ أ ي ﻣ ﺎ د ة ﺳ ﺎ ﺋ ﻠ ﺔ ﻓ ﻘ ﺪ ﻳ ﺤ ﺪ ث ﺗﻠ ﻒ ﻛﺒ ﻴ ﺮ ﻟ ﻠ ﺠ ﻬ ﺎ ز ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬه اﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﺺ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﲡﺤﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺛﻘﻮب اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﲤﻨﻊ زﻳﺎدة اﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬وﺣﺘﻰ اﳌﻮاد اﳋﻔﻴﻔﺔ أو‬
‫اﻟﻨﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﻮرق أو اﻟﻘﻤﺎش ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺪ ﺛﻘﻮب اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ أﺟﺰاء ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻼم ﻣﻦ اﻟﺪاﺧﻞ ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺻﻼح واﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧـﺔ اﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻔﻨﻲ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising